<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="ru">
	<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=PlagueEater</id>
	<title>MPlusWiki - Вклад участника [ru]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=PlagueEater"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php/%D0%A1%D0%BB%D1%83%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%B1%D0%BD%D0%B0%D1%8F:%D0%92%D0%BA%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B4/PlagueEater"/>
	<updated>2026-04-12T11:12:10Z</updated>
	<subtitle>Вклад участника</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.34.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B3%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%BA%D0%B0,_%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%B8_%D1%81%D0%B0%D0%B1%D0%BC%D0%B8%D1%82_%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%B9%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B2/en&amp;diff=2825</id>
		<title>Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B3%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%BA%D0%B0,_%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%B8_%D1%81%D0%B0%D0%B1%D0%BC%D0%B8%D1%82_%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%B9%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B2/en&amp;diff=2825"/>
		<updated>2026-04-10T10:14:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
MicroStock+ is an effective and comprehensive product that allows you to attribute, upload, and submit files without leaving your browser page. This guide will introduce you to the most important features, teach you how to submit files quickly and efficiently, and will also help you solving the most common issues related to this topic. We wish for all your files to be approved in advance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preparing your files ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before uploading files to any microstock agency, be sure to familiarize yourself with its requirements. Each microstock agency website has a dedicated section for this, and additional information can be found on relevant forums. If you missed a specific requirement - don't worry. If files don't meet known and measurable parameters, our product will not upload them to microstock agencies and will report an error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Video content===&lt;br /&gt;
We do not upload custom thumbnails to the microstock agencies. However, if you already have a thumbnail with embedded metadata, you can upload it to M+ along with the file. In this case, M+ will import the metadata into your video, but the thumbnail will be generated automatically by the microstock agency. Be sure to name the thumbnail the same as the video file!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Photos and raster illustrations===&lt;br /&gt;
When uploading to M+, a thumbnail is generated automatically. You don't need to do this manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Vector files===&lt;br /&gt;
M+ works with the .EPS files '''ONLY''', even though some agencies support .AI and .CDR. Currently, the Adobe Illustrator 10 EPS version is considered the standard, but some agencies do not support .EPS files above Adobe Illustrator 8. EPS8 is considered an outdated format, and you should keep in mind that many modern effects (such as transparency and shadows) get rasterized in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To successfully upload vector files to microstock agencies, you have to prepare a JPG thumbnail with an identical name (for example: filename.eps → filename.jpg). For the files to be correctly linked, the JPG thumbnail must be uploaded prior to submission. This can be done simultaneously with the vector file or at any point within 24 hours of the original upload. Failure to associate the files before submission will prevent them from being paired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File upload ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before uploading files to the microstock agencies, you must first upload them to the M+ interface. Click &amp;quot;Upload Files&amp;quot; in the left menu to proceed to the upload page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=500px heights=300px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Upload preparing and submit eng.png|center|frame|File uploading&lt;br /&gt;
File:Upload section preparing and submit eng.png|center|frame|Uploading section&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The instructions and FTP upload details are collapsed in the top section of the upload page (if you use an FTP client, such as FileZilla).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''By the way, you can upload files via FTP along with your folder structure, and M+ will automatically recreate it within its own file system.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sections below are responsible for uploading via M+.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Before you begin, prepare JPG thumbnails for vector files. While these can be added later, it is more convenient to upload it immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a destination folder by clicking the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag and drop one or multiple files into the window, or click the cloud icon to select them via your file explorer. You can pause or cancel the upload at any time using the corresponding buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uploaded files will appear in rows on the right side. A file with an upload error is marked by a red cross indicator, and a description of the error will replace the progress bar. A successfully uploaded file will be indicated by a green checkmark. To the right of the indicator, the file name, its type (and extension), its location path within M+, its size, and the upload time (accurate to the minute) are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please do not close the page or browser tab during upload, as this will interrupt the process. Instead, open M+ in a new tab or window and continue working there. Once all files have been successfully uploaded, M+ will notify you and prompt you to proceed to [[Special:MyLanguage/Управление файлами | My Files]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon navigating to &amp;quot;My Files&amp;quot; after a successful upload, the information about image and video thumbnails is cleared from the uploading page interface but remains stored within M+. Therefore, there is no need to worry when you see that thumbnails have been replaced by file type icons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are working with a large number of heavy files or using a slow internet connection, file processing may take a considerable amount of time. For this reason, a queue is formed in the &amp;quot;My Files&amp;quot;, displayed as thumbnails accompanied by information about the current processing progress. We ask for your patience during this stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if the estimated processing timer for files reaches zero, but the files do not appear in &amp;quot;My Files&amp;quot; for more than an hour, please contact technical support.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File attribution ==&lt;br /&gt;
This stage is also known as metadata entry. Each stock agency has its own metadata requirements, and we ask that you familiarize yourself with them independently before proceeding with attribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What are Batches and How to Name Them ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Platforms like iStock and Dissolve require you to upload your works in small batches united by a common theme. Think of batches as folders or tags that group similar images together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure a successful upload, you need to select several similar works, click the &amp;quot;Name Batch&amp;quot; icon (which looks like a stack of papers), and enter any name. It can even be a random set of characters. When you upload them, the M+ system will automatically create this batch on the stock site and place all your selected works inside it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Batch preparing and submit.png.png|left|500px]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata editing===&lt;br /&gt;
You can open the metadata editor by clicking the icon above the gallery in My Files, clicking the icon on a file's preview, or by double-clicking the file itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The metadata editor consists of two tabs: &amp;quot;Metadata&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Releases&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Metadata Tab====&lt;br /&gt;
This tab manages the metadata for the selected image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot; button allows you to copy the file's metadata: title, description, keywords, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;Paste&amp;quot; button allows you to paste previously copied metadata into the current file fields, either filling in empty fields or replacing existing information. Please note that this action is irreversible once you confirm and save the file!&lt;br /&gt;
* Left click on the thumbnail will open an enlarged version of the file preview on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
* To configure AI content, first click the &amp;quot;AI&amp;quot; checkbox under the description.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click the &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; button to translate the contents of the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Description&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Keywords&amp;quot; fields into English. The keywords must be entered or pasted into the field below the main keyword area, and you must click the &amp;quot;En&amp;quot; button '''BEFORE''' adding them to the list. We do not edit or guarantee the quality of the automated translation. You can choose either Microsoft or Yandex as the translation service. This setting can be changed in your personal account under &amp;quot;Interface Settings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* For advanced microstock agency category settings, click the &amp;quot;Agency Categories&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;Pricing Editor&amp;quot; button opens additional pricing settings for 123rf, Pond5, GraphicRiver, VideoHive, and some other microstock agencies.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;Custom Agency Metadata&amp;quot; button opens individual settings for Pond5, GraphicRiver, and some other agencies.&lt;br /&gt;
* To submit works to iStock ESP, you need to set Keyword Terms, which can be done using the &amp;quot;Keyword Terms&amp;quot; button. You can find details about them on the agency's website.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Other Metadata&amp;quot; opens additional settings required by specific stock agencies (for example, country and camera model).&lt;br /&gt;
* To add keywords, type or paste them into the special field under the list of current keywords and then press the &amp;quot;Enter&amp;quot; key.&lt;br /&gt;
** To delete all keywords, click the cross (X) on the left of the list. To remove an individual keyword, click the cross (X) to its right.&lt;br /&gt;
** To resize the field, drag its bottom-right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
** Keywords can be highlighted as text and then copied using your browser's features or standard keyboard shortcuts. When pasted, they will be automatically separated by spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* The button with crossed lines shuffles the keywords into a random order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;ABC&amp;quot; button arranges them in alphabetical order.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;Raise!&amp;quot; button removes non-trending keywords from the existing list and suggests more trending ones (based on M+ trends) with a similar theme. After clicking it, additional buttons will appear. You can review the changes using the toggle switch that shows the state before and after the &amp;quot;raise&amp;quot;. Use the &amp;quot;New Raise!&amp;quot; button to generate a new set of keywords.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=500px heights=120px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Raise.png|center|frame|Raise! button menu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Filling in Keywords Using M+ QuickMeta ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fastest and easiest way fill in keywords is to use the QuickMeta feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is located to the left of the metadata editor itself and consists of one or two dropdown panels, a search bar, and a hide button. The number of panels depends on whether you have purchased the [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|MicroStock+Trends]] payment plan. The QuickMeta feature works with both a single file and multiple files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the  QuickMeta feature, click the &amp;quot;Hide&amp;quot; button to the right of the search bar within the feature interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hiding quickmeta.png|center|frame|Hide QuickMeta button&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening quickmeta.png|center|frame|Open QuickMeta button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Safari users, the Open QuickMeta button will be located directly within the editor, next to the copy and paste metadata buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== If You Have an M+Trends Subscription ====&lt;br /&gt;
You have access to both QuickMeta panels. Your subscription plan determines how up-to-date the information on trending and top-performing images is. The more advanced your plan, the more current the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;quot;Top&amp;quot; panel searches the Shutterstock database. This is a tool familiar to StockSubmitter users. Subscribers on advanced plans get access to higher-ranking top results.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &amp;quot;Trending&amp;quot; panel showcases the assets with the fastest-rising rankings on Shutterstock. It is powered by a specialized database that filters out older content and ranks files by their sales performance. The [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends#Индикатор трендовости|Trend indicator]] here functions identically to the one in the &amp;quot;My Files&amp;quot; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system works automatically. As soon as you enter the editor, our neural networks analyze your work and provide keyword suggestions. You can subsequently refine this selection by adding, deleting, or editing terms in the search bar at the top of the panel, then confirming with Enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== If You DO NOT Have an M+Trends Subscription ====&lt;br /&gt;
You have access to just one QuickMeta panel: &amp;quot;Top&amp;quot;. This is a tool familiar to StockSubmitter users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply type descriptive words for your image into the search bar at the top of the panel and press Enter. You'll see relevant image thumbnails appear below. Click on any thumbnail to automatically input its keywords into your file's metadata (on the right).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From there, you can either select individual keywords by clicking on them, or use the dedicated buttons to copy the first 50 or 80 keywords all at once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To copy a title and description, hover your mouse over any thumbnail and click the green icon next to the title. This will automatically fill or replace your file's title and description fields with the content from the selected image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== How do I use QuickMeta feature? ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=250px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Autokeywordsearch.png|left|frame|The search bar and content type selection&lt;br /&gt;
File:Keywordsauto.png|left|frame|Copying keywords from the buffer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the step-by-step process:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload your file(s) to M+ and wait for them to appear in &amp;quot;My Files&amp;quot; gallery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the metadata editor by double-clicking a thumbnail, clicking the icon on the image, or using the gallery's top menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the QuickMeta panel is hidden, open it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the content type from the dropdown list to the right of the search bar (at the panel's top).&lt;br /&gt;
# If you have an &amp;quot;M+ Trends&amp;quot; subscription:&lt;br /&gt;
## The search field will be inputted automatically. You can modify the terms manually and press Enter to refresh the query.&lt;br /&gt;
## You have an access to both the upper &amp;quot;Top&amp;quot; tab and the lower &amp;quot;Trending&amp;quot; tabs. To search exclusively within trending images, select any thumbnail in the lower tab - it will expand while the &amp;quot;Top&amp;quot; tab collapses.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you '''DO NOT''' have an &amp;quot;M+ Trends&amp;quot; subscription:&lt;br /&gt;
## Enter your search terms and press Enter. Wait for the query to process.&lt;br /&gt;
## Select one or more metadata &amp;quot;donors&amp;quot; by clicking the resulting thumbnails. Click again to remove from selection.&lt;br /&gt;
# To copy a donor's title and description to your work:&lt;br /&gt;
## Hover your mouse cursor over any thumbnail in &amp;quot;Trending&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Top&amp;quot; panels - the title will appear over the image.&lt;br /&gt;
## Click the icon to the left of the title to automatically populate your file's title and description fields.&lt;br /&gt;
# To copy individual keywords:&lt;br /&gt;
## Click any keyword in the buffer.&lt;br /&gt;
## Padding color helps identify the most effective options. For detailed keyword ratings, hover over the colored circles icon on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
# To copy 50 or 80 keywords at once, use the &amp;quot;Copy 50&amp;quot;/&amp;quot;Copy 80&amp;quot; buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
# The &amp;quot;Revert&amp;quot; button will remove '''ALL''' keywords.&lt;br /&gt;
# Don't forget to save your changes!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#Metadata Tab|See more about keywords editing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Attached releases===&lt;br /&gt;
The list of attached model or property releases appears directly below the keyword buffer. You can adjust the height of this field by clicking and dragging the bottom-right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
To attach a release, you must first create one in the &amp;quot;Releases&amp;quot; tab. Once a release is attached, you can remove it at any time by clicking the &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; next to its name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bottom Panel Buttons ===&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the metadata editor, you'll find the following buttons (from left to right):&lt;br /&gt;
* Click navigation arrows to move between files in the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Clear&amp;quot; button removes ALL metadata from the file. This action is permanent once saved.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Close&amp;quot; button closes the metadata editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button applies and saves your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Releases==&lt;br /&gt;
A release is a legal agreement between you and any recognizable person in your work, or the owner of private property featured in your photo or video.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend checking the specific release requirements on the websites of the stock agencies where you plan to distribute your content.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Release.png|left|frame|Releases tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Important Notice!&lt;br /&gt;
Please '''DO NOT''' attach releases to your files by dragging them into the Easy Release field! This method is designed '''EXCLUSIVELY''' for release files created in Easy Release PRO with the StockSubmitter/M+ integration feature enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is not available on iOS yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Releases ===&lt;br /&gt;
To get started, navigate to the Releases (see image above). M+ allows you to create a database for all your releases, which you can then easily attach to your files. Below is an overview of the Release Manager's layout and its key functions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number next to &amp;quot;Releases&amp;quot; indicates how many releases are attached to the current file (in this case, none are attached).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Releasemanager.png|left|600px]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Search bar – Enter a name to filter releases in your database, then click &amp;quot;Filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Sorting – Click any column header to sort your releases. The arrow indicates the sort direction (ascending or descending).&lt;br /&gt;
#Release Card displays an individual release. It shows the release's thumbnail, name, type, date, and other details. Use the paperclip button to attach/detach the release from your file (a green border indicates it's attached).&lt;br /&gt;
#Release Actions (from left to right):&lt;br /&gt;
##Attach/Detach&lt;br /&gt;
##Edit&lt;br /&gt;
##Duplicate&lt;br /&gt;
##Delete&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;Create Release&amp;quot; button creates a new release.&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;Unattach All&amp;quot; button detaches all attached releases (this action is irreversible once saved!)&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button applies and saves your changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use navigation arrows to move between files in the folder without switching between the tabs or closing Metadata editor. Don't forget to save your changes!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Creating a New Release ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply click the &amp;quot;Create release&amp;quot; button located at the bottom of the interface (see point above) and follow the step-by-step instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the release type: Property Release or Model Release.&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach the release file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill in all required fields carefully. For dates, you can use the calendar icon.&lt;br /&gt;
# By default, the release is available for all stock sites, but you can specify platforms in the &amp;quot;Upload to&amp;quot; field.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Create Release&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This release is now ready to be attached to your files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Uploading to Microstock Agencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before uploading, please make sure that your files are ready. You can check their status using the color-coded bar beneath each thumbnail or in the &amp;quot;Upload/Submit&amp;quot; tab. Select a file or group of files to view their current status across different microstock platforms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To upload successfully, your files must have the &amp;quot;Ready&amp;quot; status for your target microstock agency. If a file displays &amp;quot;Not Ready&amp;quot; or another error status (see our [[Special:MyLanguage/Статусы в MicroStock+ | detailed status guide]] for more information), hover your mouse cursor over the status message for troubleshooting suggestions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, select the target microstock agencies with checkboxes, or click &amp;quot;Select All&amp;quot; to upload to all connected platforms. Click the &amp;quot;Upload Selected&amp;quot; button to begin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submitting to Microstock agencies==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What is a Submit? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A submit is the automated process of filling in all metadata fields for a '''single file''' and sending it for review by microstock agency inspectors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Submits are counted separately for each microstock agency. For example, if you're subscribed to Like payment plan and work with, you can make 2,500 submits per month, 250 for each agency. When using M+ with StockSubmitter, you only pay for submits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every user receives 33 free submits monthly per agency (with Free payment plan). Submits to iStock ESP, Dreamstime, YayImages, and Pond5 are always unlimited and free.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We provide free and unlimited submits to all novice contributors who have never purchased a paid subscription and have total earnings below $50 across all stock agencies. This feature will be permanently disabled once your total earnings reach $50.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To activate the offer enable the &amp;quot;Permit collecting and displaying earnings data&amp;quot; setting in your dashboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In M+, files are automatically submitted to agencies right after a successful upload. When your metadata is correct and our servers handle the upload reliably, there's no reason to delay submission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a submit is blocked (e.g., due to running out of submissions or the file not yet appearing on the agency side), M+ will keep retrying. Once the issue is resolved, the submission will proceed within one hour after the last failed attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon completion, files will show the &amp;quot;Submitted&amp;quot; status. Depending on the agency's response, this will later update to either &amp;quot;Accepted&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Rejected&amp;quot; (for agencies that support this feature).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Most common file submission problems and solutions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== I dragged a release file into &amp;quot;Releases&amp;quot; but can't find it in the list! ===&lt;br /&gt;
Please note: Drag-and-drop in the Releases tab works exclusively for files created in Easy Release PRO with StockSubmitter / M+ integration enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all other releases, please use the &amp;quot;Create Release&amp;quot; creation form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why did a duplicate of my file appeared on the microstock agency? ===&lt;br /&gt;
This usually happens because you submitted the files manually on the agency's website after M+ has already uploaded them. It causes M+ to lose track and retry the upload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you submit files manually, remember to set their status to &amp;quot;Submitted&amp;quot; in M+ immediately after uploading them to the microstock agency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why are my files stuck in the queue for so long? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stock agencies often restrict multi-threaded uploads, so M+ mimics human user behavior to avoid triggering security alerts. While this process is typically fast, you may see the &amp;quot;In Queue&amp;quot; status for longer periods during heavy uploads or when agency servers are overloaded. If the queue is progressing, there's no need to worry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a file shows a &amp;quot;Connection Error&amp;quot; with a timer under the &amp;quot;Uploading&amp;quot; status, M+ will automatically retry at intervals until the connection with the microstock server is restored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Internal Error ===&lt;br /&gt;
If this error persists for more than an hour and you're able to upload/submit files directly on the microstock agency's website without issues, please contact our technical support team for assistance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Subscription Problem on VectorStock ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This error occurs when you've run out of available submits while uploading to VectorStock. On this platform, submission happens instantly during the upload process, so without available submits, uploading becomes impossible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve an issue either upgrade to a higher subscription plan or increase the limit for this month. After that, change the file status for VectorStock to &amp;quot;Ready&amp;quot; and re-upload.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B3%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%BA%D0%B0,_%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%B8_%D1%81%D0%B0%D0%B1%D0%BC%D0%B8%D1%82_%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%B9%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B2/6/en&amp;diff=2824</id>
		<title>Translations:Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов/6/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B3%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%BA%D0%B0,_%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%B8_%D1%81%D0%B0%D0%B1%D0%BC%D0%B8%D1%82_%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%B9%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B2/6/en&amp;diff=2824"/>
		<updated>2026-04-10T10:14:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;To successfully upload vector files to microstock agencies, you have to prepare a JPG thumbnail with an identical name (for example: filename.eps → filename.jpg). For the files to be correctly linked, the JPG thumbnail must be uploaded prior to submission. This can be done simultaneously with the vector file or at any point within 24 hours of the original upload. Failure to associate the files before submission will prevent them from being paired.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B3%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%BA%D0%B0,_%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%B8_%D1%81%D0%B0%D0%B1%D0%BC%D0%B8%D1%82_%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%B9%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B2&amp;diff=2820</id>
		<title>Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%9F%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B3%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%BA%D0%B0,_%D0%B7%D0%B0%D0%B3%D1%80%D1%83%D0%B7%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%B8_%D1%81%D0%B0%D0%B1%D0%BC%D0%B8%D1%82_%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%B9%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B2&amp;diff=2820"/>
		<updated>2026-04-10T10:10:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
MicroStock+ — это эффективный и комплексный продукт, позволяющий вам атрибутировать, загружать и сабмитить файлы, не выходя со страницы браузера. Данное руководство познакомит вас с самыми важными функциями нашего продукта, научит быстро и качественно сабмитить файлы, а также поможет решить наиболее распространённые проблемы, связанные с данной темой. Заранее желаем всем вашим файлам быть одобренными!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Подготовка файлов == &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Перед тем как загружать файлы на любой сток, обязательно ознакомьтесь с его требованиями. На каждом сайте микростокового агентства есть соответствующий раздел, а дополнительную информацию можно почерпнуть из тематических форумов. Если вы не учли какое-то отдельное требование — не переживайте. Если файлы не подходят известным и измеряемым параметрам, наш продукт не будет загружать их на стоки и сообщит об ошибке.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Видео === &amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
При загрузке видео в М+ система автоматически создаёт для него превью. Мы не загружаем пользовательские превью на стоки. Однако если у вас уже есть превью с внедрёнными метаданными, его можно загрузить в М+ вместе с видео. В этом случае М+ импортирует метаданные в ваш ролик, однако превью будет автоматически сгенерировано самим стоком. Обязательно назовите превью так же, как и сам ролик!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Фотографии и растровые иллюстрации === &amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
При загрузке на М+ превью генерируется автоматически. Вам не нужно делать это вручную.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Векторные файлы === &amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
М+ работает '''ТОЛЬКО''' с форматом, несмотря на то, что некоторые агентства поддерживают AI и CDR. На данный момент стандартом считается EPS версии Adobe Illustrator 10, но некоторые агентства не поддерживают EPS выше версии Adobe Illustrator 8. EPS8 считается устаревшим форматом, и вам стоит учесть, что многие современные эффекты (например, прозрачность и тени) в нём растрируются.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:6--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Для успешной загрузки векторных файлов на стоки необходимо подготовить JPG-превью с идентичным названием (например: filename.eps → filename.jpg). Превью можно загрузить одновременно с основным файлом через интерфейс М+, но не более, чем через сутки после загрузки вектора, и обязательно до отправки контента на стоки, иначе файлы не объединятся.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Загрузка файлов == &amp;lt;!--T:7--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Прежде чем загружать файлы на стоки, вам потребуется один раз загрузить их в интерфейс М+. Для этого нажмите «Загрузить файлы» в левом меню. Вы будете перемещены на страницу загрузки файлов.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:8--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=500px heights=300px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Upload preparing and submit.png.png|center|frame|Загрузка файлов&lt;br /&gt;
File:Upload section preparing and submit.png.jpg|center|frame|Раздел загрузки&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:9--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
В верхнем блоке раздела загрузки свёрнуты общие инструкции и данные для загрузке по FTP (если вы используете FTP загрузчик, например FileZilla).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:10--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Кстати, вы можете загрузить файлы по FTP вместе со структурой каталогов, и тогда М+ автоматически воссоздаст её внутри своей файловой системы.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:11--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Блоки ниже отвечают за загрузку средствами М+'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Перед загрузкой подготовьте превью для векторных файлов, если вы с ними работаете. Подгрузить их можно будет и позже, но это удобней делать сразу;&lt;br /&gt;
# Сперва выберите папку, в которую вы бы хотели загрузить файлы, кликнув по раскрывающемуся списку;&lt;br /&gt;
# Перетащите в окно один или несколько файлов, либо кликните по иконке с облаком и выберите файлы через проводник. Вы можете в любой момент приостановить или отменить загрузку с помощью соответствующих кнопок.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:12--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Загружаемые файлы появятся справа в строках. Загрузка с ошибкой отмечается красным индикатором в виде крестика, а на месте полосы процесса загрузки появится описание ошибки. Если файл загружен успешно, индикатор примет форму зелёной галочки. Правее указано название файла, его тип (и расширение), адрес расположения файла в М+, его вес и время загрузки с точностью до минуты.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Пожалуйста, не закрывайте страницу/вкладку во время загрузки, иначе процесс будет прерван! Вместо этого откройте М+ в соседней вкладке вашего браузера (или окне) и продолжите работу там. Как только все файлы будут успешно загружены, М+ оповестит вас об этом и предложит перейти в [[Управление файлами | «Мои файлы»]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:13--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
При переходе в «Мои файлы» после успешной загрузки информация о превью изображений и видео стирается из загрузчика, но сохраняется в самом М+, потому не переживайте о том, что превью заменились пиктограммами.&lt;br /&gt;
Если вы работаете с большим количеством тяжёлых файлов или используете медленное интернет-соединение, обработка файлов может занять достаточно долгое время, потому в «Моих файлах» формируется очередь в виде превью с информацией о прогрессе обработки файла. Пожалуйста, проявите терпение на этом этапе.&lt;br /&gt;
Однако, если таймер у файлов до ожидаемого завершения обработки дошёл до нуля, а файлы дольше часа не появляются в «Моих файлах», обратитесь в техподдержку.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Атрибутирование файлов == &amp;lt;!--T:14--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Этот этап так же известен, как заполнение метаданных. У каждого стока есть свои требованиях к метаданным, и мы просим вас самостоятельно с ними ознакомиться, прежде чем приступать к атрибутированию.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Батчи и указание имени батча === &amp;lt;!--T:15--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Istock и Dissolve принимают работы небольшими, объединёнными одной темой группами — батчами. Можете относиться к батчам как к папкам или объединяющему тегу.&lt;br /&gt;
Для корректной загрузки вам необходимо выделить несколько похожих работ, нажать иконку «Задать название батча» (в виде стопки бумаги) и ввести любое имя — это может быть даже набор символов. При загрузке на сток М+ самостоятельно создаст на стоке батч и загрузит туда работы.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:16--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Batch preparing and submit.png.png|left|500px]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Метаданные === &amp;lt;!--T:17--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Откройте [[Управление файлами | редактор метаданных]] с помощью клика по иконке над галереей, иконке на превью файла или двойного клика по файлу.&lt;br /&gt;
Редактор метаданных состоит из вкладки «Метаданные» и «Редактор релизов».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Вкладка «Метаданные»==== &amp;lt;!--T:18--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Вкладка отвечает за метаданные выбранной работы.&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка «Скопировать» позволяет скопировать метаданные файла: название, описание, ключевые слова и т.п.&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка «Вставить» позволяет вставить уже скопированные метаданные в поля текущего файла: заполнить пустующие поля или заменить в них информацию. Обратите внимание, что данное действие необратимо после подтверждения и сохранения файла!&lt;br /&gt;
* Клик по превью откроет слева увеличенное превью файла&lt;br /&gt;
* Для настройки ИИ контента сперва кликните чекбокс «AI» под описанием&lt;br /&gt;
* Нажмите кнопку En, чтобы перевести содержимое полей «Заголовок», «Описание» и ключевые слова на английский. Последние нужно ввести или вставить в поле под ключевыми полями и нажать кнопку «En» '''ДО''' того, как вы добавите их в список. Мы не редактируем и не гарантируем качество машинного перевода. В качестве переводчика можно выбрать либо Microsoft, либо Yandex. Изменить настройку можно в личном кабинете в разделе «Настройки интерфейса»&lt;br /&gt;
* Для расширенной настройки категорий стоков кликните по кнопке «Категории стоков»&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка «Настройки цен» откроет вам дополнительные настройки цен для 123rf, Pond5, GraphicRiver, VideoHive и некоторых других стоков&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка «Другие поля стоков» откроет индивидуальные настройки для Pond5 и GraphicRiver и некоторых других стоков&lt;br /&gt;
* Для сабмита работ на Istock ESP необходимо задать уточнения ключевых, и это можно сделать с помощью кнопки «Уточнения ключевых». Подробности о них можно узнать на сайте агентства&lt;br /&gt;
* «Другие поля» открывают дополнительные настройки, необходимые для отдельных стоков (например, страну происхождения и модель камеры)&lt;br /&gt;
* Для того, чтобы заполнить ключевые слова, напишите или вставьте их в специальную форму под списком текущих ключевых слов, а затем нажмите кнопку Enter&lt;br /&gt;
** Вы можете удалить все ключевые слова, кликнув по крестику слева от списка, а можете удалить отдельные ключевые слова, кликая по крестикам справа от отдельного ключевого слова&lt;br /&gt;
** Поле можно расширить или сузить, потянув за нижний правый угол&lt;br /&gt;
** Ключевые слова можно выделить как текст, а затем скопировать средствами браузера или стандартными сочетаниями клавиш. При вставке они будут автоматически разделены пробелами&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка в виде перекрещенных линий перемешивает ключевые слова в случайном порядке&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка «ABC» располагает их в алфавитном порядке&lt;br /&gt;
* Кнопка &amp;quot;Райз!&amp;quot; удаляет нетрендовые ключевые слова из существующего списка и подбирает более трендовые (по показателям M+ trends) со схожей тематикой. После нажатия на неё появятся дополнительные кнопки. Вы можете просмотреть разницу с помощью тоггла, переключающего состояние до райза и после райза. С помощью кнопки &amp;quot;Новый райз!&amp;quot; можно повторно подобрать ключевые слова.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=500px heights=120px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Raise.png|center|frame|Кнопки функции Райз!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Заполнение ключевых слов через автоподбор М+ === &amp;lt;!--T:19--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Самый быстрый и простой способ подобрать ключевые слова — это воспользоваться автоматическим подбором ключевых слов.&lt;br /&gt;
Он находится слева от самого редактора метаданных и состоит из одной или двух раскрывающихся панелей, поисковой строкой и кнопкой скрытия. Количество панелей зависит от того, приобретён ли у вас тариф [[Работа с MicroStock+Trends|MicroStock+Trends]]. Автоподбор работает как с одним файлом, так и с несколькими.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:20--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Если автоподбор вам не нужен, справа от поиска в автоподборе есть кнопка «Скрыть».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:21--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Hiding quickmeta.png|center|frame|Кнопка скрытия автоподбора&lt;br /&gt;
File:Opening quickmeta.png|center|frame|Кнопка отображения автоподбора&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:22--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
У пользователей Safari кнопка открытия будет в самом редакторе рядом с копированием и вставкой метаданных.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Если у вас есть подписка M+Trends ==== &amp;lt;!--T:23--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Вам доступны обе панели автоподбора. В зависимости от тарифа меняется свежесть информации о трендовых и топовых работах. Чем более продвинутый тариф, тем более актуальна информация.&lt;br /&gt;
* Панель «Топовые» осуществляет поиск по базе данных работ Shutterstock — эта функция хорошо известна тем, кто работает со StockSubmitter. У пользователей с продвинутым тарифом есть доступ к топам на более высоких позициях.&lt;br /&gt;
* Панель «Трендовые» показывает самые активно растущие в рейтингах Shutterstock работы. Функционирование этого раздела осуществляется с помощью базы данных, которая отфильтровывает все старые работы и ранжирует файлы по продаваемости. [[Работа с MicroStock+Trends#Индикатор трендовости|Индикатор трендовости]] в этой панели работает точно так же, как и в разделе «Мои файлы».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:24--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Вам не нужно заполнять поиск. Наши нейросети проанализируют вашу работу и начнут подбирать превью в тот момент, когда вы зайдёте в редактор. Впрочем, вы всегда можете откорректировать подборку: дополнить, удалить или изменить ключевые слова в поисковой строке (на самом верху панели), а затем нажать Enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Если у вас НЕ приобретена подписка на M+Trends ==== &amp;lt;!--T:25--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Вам доступна только верхняя панель автоподбора под названием «Топовые». Она осуществляет поиск по базе данных работ Shutterstock — эта функция хорошо известна тем, кто работает со StockSubmitter.&lt;br /&gt;
Начните вбивать в поиск (на самом верху панели) характеризующие вашу работу слова на английском или русском языке, затем нажмите Enter. Снизу отобразится результат в виде превью работ по вашему запросу. Клик по одному из них откроет ключевые слова выбранной работы в вашем редакторе метаданных. Просто кликайте по нужным вам ключевым словам или скопируйте разом первые 50/80 ключевых слов с помощью соответствующих кнопок.&lt;br /&gt;
Чтобы скопировать заголовок, наведите курсор мыши на превью. Кликните по зелёной иконке слева от названия - название и описание работы при этом заменят соответствующие поля вашей работы.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Как мне использовать автоподбор? ==== &amp;lt;!--T:26--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:27--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=250px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Autokeywordsearch.png|left|frame|Поисковая строка ключевых слов и выбор типа контента&lt;br /&gt;
File:Keywordsauto.png|left|frame|Копирование ключевых слов из буфера&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:28--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Последовательность действий такова:&lt;br /&gt;
# Загрузите файл/ы в M+ и дождитесь их появления в галерее&lt;br /&gt;
# Зайдите в метаданные работы или работ двойным кликом по превью, через иконку на работе или через верхнее меню галереи&lt;br /&gt;
# Если панель автоподбора скрыта, откройте её&lt;br /&gt;
# Выберите тип контента справа от поисковой строки (на самом верху панели) в выпадающем списке&lt;br /&gt;
# Если у вас приобретён тариф M+ Trends, поисковая строка заполнится автоматически. Вы можете изменить данные вручную и нажать Enter для обновления запроса. Вам доступна не только верхняя вкладка &amp;quot;Топовые&amp;quot;, но и нижняя вкладка с самыми трендовыми и растущими в рейтинге стоков работами. Чтобы искать только среди них, выберите любое из превью внутри вкладки, и она развернётся (а &amp;quot;Топовые&amp;quot; - свернётся)&lt;br /&gt;
# Если у вас '''НЕ''' приобретён тариф М+ Trends, заполните поисковую строку и нажмите Enter. Дождитесь выполнения запроса&lt;br /&gt;
# Выберите один или несколько &amp;quot;доноров&amp;quot; метаданных, кликая по появившимся превью. Повторный клик по превью удалит его из подборки&lt;br /&gt;
# Чтобы скопировать название и описание &amp;quot;донора&amp;quot; и вставить его в свою работу, наведите мышь на любое превью в панели &amp;quot;Трендовые&amp;quot; или &amp;quot;Топовые&amp;quot;. При этом название отобразится поверх превью. Кликните по иконке слева от названия - название и описание работы при этом заменят соответствующие поля вашей работы&lt;br /&gt;
# Чтобы скопировать одно ключевое слово, кликните по нему в буфере. Оттенок подложки ключевого слова поможет вам выбрать наиболее удачные варианты. Подробное описание рейтинга ключевых слов можно посмотреть справа, наведя мышь на иконку в виде разноцветных кругов.&lt;br /&gt;
# Если вы хотите скопировать сразу 50 или 80 ключевых слов, используйте кнопку &amp;quot;Скопировать 50&amp;quot;/ &amp;quot;Скопировать 80&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Кнопка &amp;quot;Откатить&amp;quot; удалит '''ВСЕ''' ключевые слова&lt;br /&gt;
# Не забудьте сохранить изменения!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#Вкладка «Метаданные»|Подробнее об управлении ключевыми словами]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Прикреплённые релизы=== &amp;lt;!--T:30--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Под буфером ключевых слов находится список прикреплённых релизов. Вы можете расширить или сузить этот список, потянув за нижний правый угол текстового поля.&lt;br /&gt;
Прежде чем прикрепить релиз, его необходимо создать. Для этого и прикрепления релизов используется соседняя вкладка &amp;quot;Релизы&amp;quot;. Но уже прикреплённые релизы вы можете открепить, нажав на крестик справа от названия релиза.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Кнопки в нижней панели === &amp;lt;!--T:31--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Наконец, в самой нижней части редактора метаданных находятся (слева направо):&lt;br /&gt;
*Кнопки для перемещения по файлам внутри папки (в виде стрелок)&lt;br /&gt;
*Кнопка очистки метаданных (обратите внимание, что нажатие на эту кнопку очистит ВСЕ метаданные работы, и после сохранения изменений вернуть их будет невозможно)&lt;br /&gt;
*Кнопка закрытия редактора метаданных&lt;br /&gt;
*Кнопка сохранения данных.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Релизы== &amp;lt;!--T:32--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Релиз — это письменное соглашение между вами и человеком, представленным в вашей работе, либо владельцем собственности, которая изображена на вашей фотографии/присутствует в видеоролике. Подробнее с требованиями к релизам вы можете ознакомиться на сайте стоков, на которых вы планируете продавать свои работы.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=600px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Release.png|left|frame|Переход во вкладку релизов&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:33--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Пожалуйста, '''НЕ''' прикрепляйте релизы к работам перетаскиванием в поле Easy Release! Эта опция доступна '''ТОЛЬКО''' для файлов релизов, созданных в Easy Release PRO с опцией интеграции с SS/M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:34--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На платформе iOS ими эта опция пока не реализована.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Менеджер релизов=== &amp;lt;!--T:35--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Для начала перейдите в менеджер релизов (изображение выше). М+ позволяет создать общую базу данных всех ваших релизов и позже прикреплять необходимые из них к отдельным работам. Ниже представлена структура менеджера релизов и описание его функций. Число справа от надписи &amp;quot;Прикреплённые релизы&amp;quot; показывает количество прикреплённых к данной работе релизов (в данном случае они не прикреплены).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:36--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Releasemanager.png|left|600px]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:37--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Поисковая строка для фильтрации релизов в вашей базе данных релизов. Введите название и нажмите кнопку &amp;quot;Найти&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Нажатие на заголовки в этой таблице позволит отсортировать релизы внутри вашей базы данных по выбранному признаку. Направление стрелочки показывает направление сортировки: от меньшего к большему либо наоборот&lt;br /&gt;
#Это карточка отдельного релиза. С помощью кнопки с бумажной кнопкой вы можете прикрепить релиз к вашей работе. При этом у него появится зелёная обводка. Справа - превью релиза и его название, тип, дата и т.д.&lt;br /&gt;
#Кнопки управления карточкой релиза. Слева направо:&lt;br /&gt;
##Прикрепление/открепление релиза&lt;br /&gt;
##Редактирование релиза&lt;br /&gt;
##Дублирование релиза&lt;br /&gt;
##Удаление релиза&lt;br /&gt;
#Кнопка создания нового релиза&lt;br /&gt;
#Кнопка открепления всех релизов (данное действие необратимо после сохранения данных!)&lt;br /&gt;
#Кнопка сохранения&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:38--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Чтобы перемещаться между работами внутри папки без перехода в редактор метаданных и закрытия этого окна воспользоваться стрелочками (слева). Не забывайте сохранять данные о релизах!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Создание нового релиза=== &amp;lt;!--T:39--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Для того, чтобы создать релиз, нажмите на соответствующую кнопку в нижней части интерфейса (см. предыдущий пункт) и следуйте инструкции.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:40--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Выберите тип релиза: релиз собственности или релиз модели&lt;br /&gt;
# Прикрепите файл релиза&lt;br /&gt;
# Внимательно заполните все необходимые поля. Для дат можно воспользоваться иконкой календаря&lt;br /&gt;
# По умолчанию релиз доступен для всех стоков, но в строке &amp;quot;Загружать на&amp;quot; можно выбрать стоки, для которых вы создаёте этот релиз&lt;br /&gt;
# Нажмите кнопку &amp;quot;Создать релиз&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:41--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Теперь данный релиз можно прикреплять к вашим работам.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Загрузка на стоки== &amp;lt;!--T:42--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
После атрибутации убедитесь в том, что с файлами всё в порядке. За это отвечает цветовая полоса под превью файла и вкладка «Сабмиты». Выделите файл или группу файлов, чтобы увидеть его/их статус в на разных стоках.&lt;br /&gt;
Для корректной загрузки на стоки у файлов должен быть статус «Готов к загрузке» напротив целевого микростокового агентства. Если файл имеет статус «Не готов к загрузке» или другой статус с ошибкой (подробней о статусах читайте в [[Статусы в MicroStock+ | этом руководстве]]), а вы не понимаете, как решить проблему, попробуйте навести курсор мыши на статус для получения рекомендаций.&lt;br /&gt;
Затем выберите стоки с помощью чекбоксов или кликните сверху «Выделить все», если вы хотите загрузить работы на все подключенные стоки, и нажмите на кнопку «Загрузить выбранное».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Сабмит на стоки== &amp;lt;!--T:43--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Что такое сабмит? === &amp;lt;!--T:44--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Сабмит — это одно автоматическое заполнение всех полей одного файла и отправка его на проверку инспекторам.&lt;br /&gt;
Сабмиты считаются отдельно для каждого стока. Например, если вы работаете с 10 стоками и используете тариф Lite, то сможете произвести 2500 сабмитов каждый месяц, по 250 на каждый сток. При использовании M+ и StockSubmitter вы платите только за сабмиты.&lt;br /&gt;
Каждому пользователю ежемесячно доступно 33 бесплатных сабмита на каждый сток (в тарифе Free), а сабмиты на iStock ESP, Dreamstime, YayImages и Pond5 безлимитны и бесплатны всегда.&lt;br /&gt;
Для начинающих стокеров у нас есть постоянная акция! Мы дарим бесплатные и безлимитные сабмиты всем нашим пользователям, которые ранее не покупали платную подписку и у которых общий доход со всех стоков меньше 50 долларов! Как только вы получаете доход выше 50 долларов, функция навсегда отключится.&lt;br /&gt;
Для того чтобы воспользоваться акцией, активируйте в личном кабинете настройку «Разрешить сбор баланса».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:45--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
В M+ сабмит на стоки происходит автоматически, как только файл будет успешно загружен. Когда метаданные заполнены верно, а загрузка стабильно выполняется нашими серверами, нет ни одной причины не сабмитить файлы сразу.&lt;br /&gt;
Если что-то мешает сабмиту (кончились сабмиты по тарифу, файл еще не появился на стоке), М+ будет продолжать попытки. Когда причина будет исправлена, сабмит произойдёт в течение часа после последней неудачной попытки.&lt;br /&gt;
Как только процедура сабмита будет завершена, файлы получат статус «Засабмичено», а по результатам приёмки — статус «Засабмичено» или «Отклонено» (если агентство поддерживает данную опцию).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Проблемы, связанные с сабмитом файлов и их решение == &amp;lt;!--T:46--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Я перетащил файл релиза в &amp;quot;Релизы&amp;quot;, но не могу после этого найти его в списке! === &amp;lt;!--T:47--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Пожалуйста, используйте перетаскивание релизов в окно менеджера релизов только в том случае, если вы создали его в Easy Release PRO с опцией интеграции с SS/M+! Во всех остальных случаях воспользуйтесь формой создания нового релиза!&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=== Почему мои файлы загрузились на сток повторно? ===&lt;br /&gt;
Чаще всего это связано с тем, что вы попытались вручную засабмитить файлы на самом стоке после того, как М+ их загрузил. В этом случае М+ теряет файлы и пытается загрузить их повторно.&lt;br /&gt;
Если вам по какой-то причине очень необходимо сабмитить файлы вручную, измените их статус на «Засабмичено» в М+ сразу после загрузки на сток.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Почему мои файлы очень долго висят в очереди? === &amp;lt;!--T:48--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Стоки плохо относятся к многопоточной загрузке, поэтому М+ имитирует поведение реального пользователя, чтобы не вызывать подозрений. Обычно этот процесс протекает быстро, но если файлов много или серверы стоков перегружены, вы можете какое-то время наблюдать статус «В очереди» у ваших файлов. Если очередь сокращается, то всё в порядке.&lt;br /&gt;
Если у файла под статусом &amp;quot;Загружается&amp;quot; есть ошибка &amp;quot;Connection error&amp;quot; с таймером, то М+ будет пытаться загрузить периодически, пока связь с сервером стока не восстановится.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Internal error === &amp;lt;!--T:49--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Если ошибка держится дольше часа и при этом ручная загрузка/сабмит на сайте стока работает нормально — свяжитесь с техподдержкой.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Subscription problem на VectorStock === &amp;lt;!--T:50--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
У вас кончились доступные сабмиты в момент загрузки на Vectorstock. На этом стоке сабмит выполняется непосредственно при загрузке, поэтому без доступных сабмитов загрузка тоже невозможна. Для решения проблемы приобретите один из вариантов подписки, перейдите на более крупный тариф, либо докупите сабмиты. Затем произведите загрузку повторно (переключите статус файла на VectorStock на «Готов к загрузке» и затем запустите загрузку заново).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP&amp;diff=2817</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP&amp;diff=2817"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:43:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Некоторое время назад новая система защиты от iStock ESP сделала сабмит через M+ и StockSubmitter невозможным. Однако мы нашли обходной путь в виде расширения для браузера Chrome. Расширение может работать и в других браузерах, но на данный момент тестирование на них ещё в процессе.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Порядок установки=== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Скачайте архив ZIP и распакуйте в любую папку на вашем компьютере.&lt;br /&gt;
#Откройте Chrome и перейдите в настройки (Settings). Перейдите в раздел &amp;quot;Управление Расширениями&amp;quot; (Extensions). Активируйте режим разработчика (Developer mode) в верхней части страницы&lt;br /&gt;
#Кликните кнопку &amp;quot;Загрузить расширение&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Выберите папку, в которую вы распаковали расширение&lt;br /&gt;
#Дождитесь всплывающего уведомления&lt;br /&gt;
#Авторизуйтесь на сайте ESP. Не закрывайте вкладку расширения, пока не выполните сабмит всех файлов!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2816</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2816"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:41:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «After completing these steps, keywording, uploading, and submitting should work correctly. Upload speed depends on your internet connection. Your browser must rem...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a browser extension for Chrome. While the extension might also work in other browsers, please note that testing on is not yet complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Install===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the ZIP archive and extract it to any folder on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#Open Chrome and go to Settings. Navigate to the Extensions section. Enable Developer mode at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Load unpacked''' button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder where you extracted the extension&lt;br /&gt;
#Wait for the pop‑up notification to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Log into ESP. Keep the extension tab open until you've submitted all files!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Developer mode&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Load Unpacked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After completing these steps, keywording, uploading, and submitting should work correctly. Upload speed depends on your internet connection. Your browser must remain open for the upload to proceed. For any questions, please contact [[Special:MyLanguage/Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки?|M+ support chat]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/5/en&amp;diff=2815</id>
		<title>Translations:Использование приложения для iStock ESP/5/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/5/en&amp;diff=2815"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:41:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «After completing these steps, keywording, uploading, and submitting should work correctly. Upload speed depends on your internet connection. Your browser must rem...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;After completing these steps, keywording, uploading, and submitting should work correctly. Upload speed depends on your internet connection. Your browser must remain open for the upload to proceed. For any questions, please contact [[Special:MyLanguage/Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки?|M+ support chat]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2814</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2814"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:40:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt; File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Developer mode File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Load Unpacked &amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a browser extension for Chrome. While the extension might also work in other browsers, please note that testing on is not yet complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Install===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the ZIP archive and extract it to any folder on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#Open Chrome and go to Settings. Navigate to the Extensions section. Enable Developer mode at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Load unpacked''' button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder where you extracted the extension&lt;br /&gt;
#Wait for the pop‑up notification to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Log into ESP. Keep the extension tab open until you've submitted all files!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Developer mode&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Load Unpacked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/4/en&amp;diff=2813</id>
		<title>Translations:Использование приложения для iStock ESP/4/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/4/en&amp;diff=2813"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:40:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt; File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Developer mode File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Load Unpacked &amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Developer mode&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Load Unpacked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2812</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2812"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:39:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «#Download the ZIP archive and extract it to any folder on your computer #Open Chrome and go to Settings. Navigate to the Extensions section. Enable Developer mode...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a browser extension for Chrome. While the extension might also work in other browsers, please note that testing on is not yet complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Install===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the ZIP archive and extract it to any folder on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#Open Chrome and go to Settings. Navigate to the Extensions section. Enable Developer mode at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Load unpacked''' button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder where you extracted the extension&lt;br /&gt;
#Wait for the pop‑up notification to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Log into ESP. Keep the extension tab open until you've submitted all files!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/3/en&amp;diff=2811</id>
		<title>Translations:Использование приложения для iStock ESP/3/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/3/en&amp;diff=2811"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:39:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «#Download the ZIP archive and extract it to any folder on your computer #Open Chrome and go to Settings. Navigate to the Extensions section. Enable Developer mode...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#Download the ZIP archive and extract it to any folder on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
#Open Chrome and go to Settings. Navigate to the Extensions section. Enable Developer mode at the top of the page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the '''Load unpacked''' button&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder where you extracted the extension&lt;br /&gt;
#Wait for the pop‑up notification to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Log into ESP. Keep the extension tab open until you've submitted all files!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2810</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2810"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:37:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «===How to Install===»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a browser extension for Chrome. While the extension might also work in other browsers, please note that testing on is not yet complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Install===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Скачайте архив ZIP и распакуйте в любую папку на вашем компьютере.&lt;br /&gt;
#Откройте Chrome и перейдите в настройки (Settings). Перейдите в раздел &amp;quot;Управление Расширениями&amp;quot; (Extensions). Активируйте режим разработчика (Developer mode) в верхней части страницы&lt;br /&gt;
#Кликните кнопку &amp;quot;Загрузить расширение&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Выберите папку, в которую вы распаковали расширение&lt;br /&gt;
#Дождитесь всплывающего уведомления&lt;br /&gt;
#Авторизуйтесь на сайте ESP. Не закрывайте вкладку расширения, пока не выполните сабмит всех файлов!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/2/en&amp;diff=2809</id>
		<title>Translations:Использование приложения для iStock ESP/2/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/2/en&amp;diff=2809"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:37:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «===How to Install===»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===How to Install===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2808</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2808"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:36:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a b...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a browser extension for Chrome. While the extension might also work in other browsers, please note that testing on is not yet complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Порядок установки===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Скачайте архив ZIP и распакуйте в любую папку на вашем компьютере.&lt;br /&gt;
#Откройте Chrome и перейдите в настройки (Settings). Перейдите в раздел &amp;quot;Управление Расширениями&amp;quot; (Extensions). Активируйте режим разработчика (Developer mode) в верхней части страницы&lt;br /&gt;
#Кликните кнопку &amp;quot;Загрузить расширение&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Выберите папку, в которую вы распаковали расширение&lt;br /&gt;
#Дождитесь всплывающего уведомления&lt;br /&gt;
#Авторизуйтесь на сайте ESP. Не закрывайте вкладку расширения, пока не выполните сабмит всех файлов!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/1/en&amp;diff=2807</id>
		<title>Translations:Использование приложения для iStock ESP/1/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/1/en&amp;diff=2807"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:36:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a b...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Some time ago, a new iStock ESP protection system made submitting through M+ and StockSubmitter impossible. However, we've developed a workaround in a form of a browser extension for Chrome. While the extension might also work in other browsers, please note that testing on is not yet complete.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2806</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/en&amp;diff=2806"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:34:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «How to use an app for iStock ESP»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Некоторое время назад новая система защиты от iStock ESP сделала сабмит через M+ и StockSubmitter невозможным. Однако мы нашли обходной путь в виде расширения для браузера Chrome. Расширение может работать и в других браузерах, но на данный момент тестирование на них ещё в процессе.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Порядок установки===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Скачайте архив ZIP и распакуйте в любую папку на вашем компьютере.&lt;br /&gt;
#Откройте Chrome и перейдите в настройки (Settings). Перейдите в раздел &amp;quot;Управление Расширениями&amp;quot; (Extensions). Активируйте режим разработчика (Developer mode) в верхней части страницы&lt;br /&gt;
#Кликните кнопку &amp;quot;Загрузить расширение&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Выберите папку, в которую вы распаковали расширение&lt;br /&gt;
#Дождитесь всплывающего уведомления&lt;br /&gt;
#Авторизуйтесь на сайте ESP. Не закрывайте вкладку расширения, пока не выполните сабмит всех файлов!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/Page_display_title/en&amp;diff=2805</id>
		<title>Translations:Использование приложения для iStock ESP/Page display title/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP/Page_display_title/en&amp;diff=2805"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:34:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «How to use an app for iStock ESP»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to use an app for iStock ESP&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP&amp;diff=2797</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP&amp;diff=2797"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:33:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Отметить эту версию для перевода&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:1--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Некоторое время назад новая система защиты от iStock ESP сделала сабмит через M+ и StockSubmitter невозможным. Однако мы нашли обходной путь в виде расширения для браузера Chrome. Расширение может работать и в других браузерах, но на данный момент тестирование на них ещё в процессе.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Порядок установки=== &amp;lt;!--T:2--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Скачайте архив ZIP и распакуйте в любую папку на вашем компьютере.&lt;br /&gt;
#Откройте Chrome и перейдите в настройки (Settings). Перейдите в раздел &amp;quot;Управление Расширениями&amp;quot; (Extensions). Активируйте режим разработчика (Developer mode) в верхней части страницы&lt;br /&gt;
#Кликните кнопку &amp;quot;Загрузить расширение&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Выберите папку, в которую вы распаковали расширение&lt;br /&gt;
#Дождитесь всплывающего уведомления&lt;br /&gt;
#Авторизуйтесь на сайте ESP. Не закрывайте вкладку расширения, пока не выполните сабмит всех файлов!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:4--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--T:5--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP&amp;diff=2796</id>
		<title>Использование приложения для iStock ESP</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%98%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%B7%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%BB%D0%BE%D0%B6%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%8F_%D0%B4%D0%BB%D1%8F_iStock_ESP&amp;diff=2796"/>
		<updated>2026-04-08T13:33:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;translate&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Некоторое время назад новая система защиты от iStock ESP сделала сабмит через M+ и StockSubmitter невозможным. Однако мы нашли обходной путь в виде расширения для браузера Chrome. Расширение может работать и в других браузерах, но на данный момент тестирование на них ещё в процессе.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Порядок установки===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Скачайте архив ZIP и распакуйте в любую папку на вашем компьютере.&lt;br /&gt;
#Откройте Chrome и перейдите в настройки (Settings). Перейдите в раздел &amp;quot;Управление Расширениями&amp;quot; (Extensions). Активируйте режим разработчика (Developer mode) в верхней части страницы&lt;br /&gt;
#Кликните кнопку &amp;quot;Загрузить расширение&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Выберите папку, в которую вы распаковали расширение&lt;br /&gt;
#Дождитесь всплывающего уведомления&lt;br /&gt;
#Авторизуйтесь на сайте ESP. Не закрывайте вкладку расширения, пока не выполните сабмит всех файлов!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=400px heights=200px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:IStock extension.png|center|frame|Режим разработчика&lt;br /&gt;
File:Load_extension.png|center|frame|Загрузка расширения&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
После этих операций уточнения, загрузка и сабмит должны работать корректно. Скорость загрузки зависит от вашего интернет соединения. Для загрузки браузер должен быть открыт. По всем вопросам обращайтесь[[Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки? | в чат поддержки M+]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/translate&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%9A%D0%B0%D0%BA_%D0%BC%D0%BD%D0%B5_%D0%BE%D0%B1%D1%80%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8%D1%82%D1%8C%D1%81%D1%8F_%D0%B2_%D1%81%D0%BB%D1%83%D0%B6%D0%B1%D1%83_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B4%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B6%D0%BA%D0%B8%3F/en&amp;diff=2795</id>
		<title>Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки?/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%9A%D0%B0%D0%BA_%D0%BC%D0%BD%D0%B5_%D0%BE%D0%B1%D1%80%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8%D1%82%D1%8C%D1%81%D1%8F_%D0%B2_%D1%81%D0%BB%D1%83%D0%B6%D0%B1%D1%83_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B4%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B6%D0%BA%D0%B8%3F/en&amp;diff=2795"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:57:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Содержимое страницы заменено на «&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We sincerely respect our users and do our best to solve every issue they meet in a blink of an eye. This guide will help you to make a proper report for tech support thus solve any problem with a minimum effort and as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Before you contact the tech support==&lt;br /&gt;
There are many problems you can solve on your own and don't wait for the tech support answer.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the problem isn't an isolated event and try to find out what triggers it. If it's a single-time event and you can't reproduce the problem, or it's completely gone after a page refresh (or PC reboot if you're using StockSubmitter) there's nothing to worry about.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If you're using M+===&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes the last update conflicts with the cached version in your browser. While staying on M+/M+Trends page press Ctrl+F5 (if you're using Windows/Linux) or Cmd + R (if you're using Mac OS X) to refresh the cashed data.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Update your browser to the latest version. By far this is one of the most frequent reasons for formatting issues.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If the file uploading speed (in M+) is too low, check if your antivirus or firewall is blocking it. Check your internet connection. Reboot your router.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you tried all the above and it didn't help we recommend you to look through other guides on this wiki, especially [[Решение наиболее распространённых проблем | FAQ]] page where you may find a ready solution for the most frequent issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===If you're using StockSubmitter===&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you've updated StockSubmitter to the latest version. To do so, close the program and start it again. It should update automatically.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you've received an error message, click the Details link in the message. It should give you a full explanation.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If the uploading speed is too low, check your internet connection and reboot your router.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Check if Stocksubmitter is blocked by antivirus or firewall.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you tried all the above and it didn't solve the problem we do recommend you to look through other guides on this wiki, especially [[Решение наиболее распространённых проблем | FAQ]] page where you may find a ready solution for the most frequent issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What you should never do==&lt;br /&gt;
* Please '''DO NOT''' use the Suggest option on our old  [https://support.microstock.plus/ FAQ]. First of all, we've abandoned it a long time ago. Secondly, we don't receive any notices from that site and we will surely miss your message thus can't possibly help you.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you're sure that the problem is caused by an agency, not by our products, please contact the microstock agency tech support. In most cases it's them who will solve the problem and will give you the most comprehensive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Please, avoid the offensive language and aggressive statements when you talk to our tech specialists. We're honestly do everything we can to help you ASAP. We ask you to respect our job even if you're very upset.&lt;br /&gt;
==I can't find my problem in FAQ section/I didn't figure out how to solve my problem==&lt;br /&gt;
There are no minor problems for our tech specialists! We will help you! Choose the most convenient way to contact us.&lt;br /&gt;
===Tech Support Live chat===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most preferable way.&lt;br /&gt;
M+ support chat is in the lower left page corner. It may appear with a small delay after page refresh. If you can't find it, make sure you've deactivated the ad-blocking software on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
StockSubmitter support chat is in the top left corner of the interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=250px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:M+ chat.png|center|frame|M+ support chat button&lt;br /&gt;
File:CC chat eng.png|center|frame|StockSubmitter support chat button&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should include your name and e-mail in the report and give a very detailed description of your issue. Specify the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The microstock agency you're having problem with (or point out that it is a general issue).&lt;br /&gt;
*An operational system (with a version) and a browser you're using.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do you have the same issue on other browsers?&lt;br /&gt;
*Give some details: is it a problem with an agency connection, file uploading, file submission or something else?&lt;br /&gt;
*What triggers the problem? For example, is it a page refreshing, file uploading, etc.?&lt;br /&gt;
*If you've received an error notification, copy an error ID or make a screenshot and include it in a report.&lt;br /&gt;
*Attach a screenshot of your issue if possible.&lt;br /&gt;
*Sometimes we might need the file ID if the problem concerns individual files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A poor example of a tech support report:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Name: Unknown Unknown&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;E-mail: Examplemail@mail.com&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Adobe doesn't work properly. What should I do?''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====A good example of a tech support report:====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Name: John Smith&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;E-mail: Examplemail@mail.com &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Hello!&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;I keep receiving endless requests for a 4-digit code when I try to connect the AdobeStock. I tried all solutions from the article in your FAQ but it didn't help.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; My OC is Mac OS X Mojave, I use the last version of Safari browser but have the same problem in the last version of Chrome. Could you help me, please!&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;(The screenshots are attached below)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Thank you in advance!''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The tech support specialist will contact you as soon as possible. Please, be patient.&lt;br /&gt;
By the way, apart from error reports and proposals you may write us some words of appreciation. We'd be very pleased to receive it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Issues with M+ Sync===&lt;br /&gt;
M+ Sync tech support chat is located in the upper menu in Support tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Синка саппорт eng.png|left|400px]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We require a latest.log. file to solve any problem with M+ Sync. Fill in the location bar of the standard file viewer with %APPDATA%/MPSynс/ (if you're using Windows) or ~/.config/MPSync/ (If you're using Mac OS X) and press Enter. Find the latest.log. file and attach it to your report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Tech support Telegram channel===&lt;br /&gt;
We have a tech support channel [https://t.me/MicrostockPlusBetaEn in Telegram]. Here you may ask any questions about our products. Sometimes other users may give you a hint too. Feel free to have off-topic conversations or discussions as long as it's polite, tolerant and doesn't offend anyone. Please, avoid the politics, radical statements, advertisements and linking to any prohibited/abusing/adult content otherwise you'll be banned from the channel forever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%9A%D0%B0%D0%BA_%D0%BC%D0%BD%D0%B5_%D0%BE%D0%B1%D1%80%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8%D1%82%D1%8C%D1%81%D1%8F_%D0%B2_%D1%81%D0%BB%D1%83%D0%B6%D0%B1%D1%83_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B4%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B6%D0%BA%D0%B8%3F/19/en&amp;diff=2794</id>
		<title>Translations:Как мне обратиться в службу поддержки?/19/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%9A%D0%B0%D0%BA_%D0%BC%D0%BD%D0%B5_%D0%BE%D0%B1%D1%80%D0%B0%D1%82%D0%B8%D1%82%D1%8C%D1%81%D1%8F_%D0%B2_%D1%81%D0%BB%D1%83%D0%B6%D0%B1%D1%83_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%B4%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B6%D0%BA%D0%B8%3F/19/en&amp;diff=2794"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:56:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Содержимое страницы заменено на «&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2793</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2793"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:54:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[#MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've upgraded my payment plan but my submissions weren't reset!===&lt;br /&gt;
When you upgrade your payment plan, your submits are reset only at the end of the conditional month. If you upgrade to a more expensive plan, a certain number of additional submits will simply be added to your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For instance, let's say you're using Lite payment plan. You've got 250 submissions per month. You've already used 200 of them and you're about to purchase Casual payment plan. You pay 10 EUR to upgrade and now have 200 more submissions to use until the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/34/en&amp;diff=2792</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/34/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/34/en&amp;diff=2792"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:54:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[#MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2791</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2791"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:50:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For instance, let's say you're using Lite payment plan. You've got 250 submissions per month. You've already used 200 of them and you're about to pu...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've upgraded my payment plan but my submissions weren't reset!===&lt;br /&gt;
When you upgrade your payment plan, your submits are reset only at the end of the conditional month. If you upgrade to a more expensive plan, a certain number of additional submits will simply be added to your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For instance, let's say you're using Lite payment plan. You've got 250 submissions per month. You've already used 200 of them and you're about to purchase Casual payment plan. You pay 10 EUR to upgrade and now have 200 more submissions to use until the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/66/en&amp;diff=2790</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/66/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/66/en&amp;diff=2790"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:50:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For instance, let's say you're using Lite payment plan. You've got 250 submissions per month. You've already used 200 of them and you're about to pu...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For instance, let's say you're using Lite payment plan. You've got 250 submissions per month. You've already used 200 of them and you're about to purchase Casual payment plan. You pay 10 EUR to upgrade and now have 200 more submissions to use until the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2789</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2789"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:50:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've upgraded my payment plan but my submissions weren't reset!===&lt;br /&gt;
When you upgrade your payment plan, your submits are reset only at the end of the conditional month. If you upgrade to a more expensive plan, a certain number of additional submits will simply be added to your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/29/en&amp;diff=2788</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/29/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/29/en&amp;diff=2788"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:50:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===I've upgraded my payment plan but my submissions weren't reset!===&lt;br /&gt;
When you upgrade your payment plan, your submits are reset only at the end of the conditional month. If you upgrade to a more expensive plan, a certain number of additional submits will simply be added to your account.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2787</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2787"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:48:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/65/en&amp;diff=2786</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/65/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/65/en&amp;diff=2786"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:48:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You've been credited with a full package price, as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2785</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2785"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:47:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/28/en&amp;diff=2784</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/28/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/28/en&amp;diff=2784"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:47:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2783</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2783"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:46:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/27/en&amp;diff=2782</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/27/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/27/en&amp;diff=2782"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:46:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment plan and then switch to a different plan, the only way to return to Starter is to purchase the package again. However, once three months have passed, you can continue using this plan as long as your balance has sufficient funds to pay for a notional month of usage.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2781</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2781"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:44:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/26/en&amp;diff=2780</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/26/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/26/en&amp;diff=2780"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:44:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Estimate your average number of submits per month and take a look at our affordable plans and packages. If needed, you can always upgrade to a [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan|more expensive plan]] by paying only the price difference, or Increase your limit.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2779</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2779"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:40:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/25/en&amp;diff=2778</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/25/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/25/en&amp;diff=2778"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:40:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plans (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2777</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2777"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:40:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/59/en&amp;diff=2776</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/59/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/59/en&amp;diff=2776"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:39:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans page. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2775</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2775"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:39:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purc...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans tile. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/64/en&amp;diff=2774</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/64/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/64/en&amp;diff=2774"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:39:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purc...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. When you make any purchase on our service, you receive the opportunity to vote for one of the 7 most popular candidates, or add a new candidate and vote for them instead.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2773</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2773"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:34:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «700px|&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans tile. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Подключение новых стоков занимает внушительное количество времени и ресурсов. Поэтому мы решили использовать голосование, чтобы определить самые популярные агентства и выстроить очередь. Совершая любые покупки на нашем сервисе вы получаете возможность проголосовать за один из 7 самых популярных претендентов или добавить нового и отдать голос ему.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/63/en&amp;diff=2771</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/63/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/63/en&amp;diff=2771"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:34:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «700px|&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2772</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2772"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:34:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Содержимое страницы заменено на «==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans tile. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Подключение новых стоков занимает внушительное количество времени и ресурсов. Поэтому мы решили использовать голосование, чтобы определить самые популярные агентства и выстроить очередь. Совершая любые покупки на нашем сервисе вы получаете возможность проголосовать за один из 7 самых популярных претендентов или добавить нового и отдать голос ему.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/23/en&amp;diff=2770</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/23/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/23/en&amp;diff=2770"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:34:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Содержимое страницы заменено на «==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==How to vote for the next microstock agencies?==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2769</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2769"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:34:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss t...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans tile. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies to add?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. Every time you make a purchase at the Store you get an opportunity to either vote for one of the microstock agencies or to add a new one to the poll. The poll is going to be there forever so don’t worry if you can’t vote right now. The current list is built based on the votes that have been already cast and it will change according to the new votes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Подключение новых стоков занимает внушительное количество времени и ресурсов. Поэтому мы решили использовать голосование, чтобы определить самые популярные агентства и выстроить очередь. Совершая любые покупки на нашем сервисе вы получаете возможность проголосовать за один из 7 самых популярных претендентов или добавить нового и отдать голос ему.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/62/en&amp;diff=2768</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/62/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/62/en&amp;diff=2768"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:34:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss t...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The packages for this particular service don't extend automatically. When the package period will be over you'll receive a relevant notification. If you'll miss the notification, we'll send an e-mail to your register e-mail box to remind about a payment. You'll be denied from uploading files to M+ until you purchase another package or delete enough files to reach 200 GB limit. If you won't solve the problem within a month, unfortunately we're going to have to delete some of your files from M+.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2767</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2767"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:33:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may o...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans tile. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Когда срок аренды подойдёт к концу, вам придёт соответствующее уведомление. Если вы всё-таки пропустите срок оплаты, в течение нескольких суток на вашу почту придёт письмо от нашей техподдержки. Функция загрузки на М+ будет заблокирована до тех пор, пока вы не удалите нужное количество файлов (чтобы удовлетворить лимит 100 Гб) или не приобретёте дополнительное место вновь. Если в течение месяца вы не решите проблему самостоятельно, мы будем вынуждены удалить часть ваших файлов с сервиса.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies to add?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. Every time you make a purchase at the Store you get an opportunity to either vote for one of the microstock agencies or to add a new one to the poll. The poll is going to be there forever so don’t worry if you can’t vote right now. The current list is built based on the votes that have been already cast and it will change according to the new votes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Подключение новых стоков занимает внушительное количество времени и ресурсов. Поэтому мы решили использовать голосование, чтобы определить самые популярные агентства и выстроить очередь. Совершая любые покупки на нашем сервисе вы получаете возможность проголосовать за один из 7 самых популярных претендентов или добавить нового и отдать голос ему.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/61/en&amp;diff=2766</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/61/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/61/en&amp;diff=2766"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:33:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may o...»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Every M+ user is granted with 200 GB of free cloud storage space but you may rent up to 4 TB of additional space for your files with MicroStock+Storage. You may only purchase a subscription package for this service for a period from 6 months to 4 years. Please, DO NOT top up the balance to purchase any subscription package!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2765</id>
		<title>Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/en&amp;diff=2765"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:33:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «x300px|&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Paid and free subscriptions are managed through our store. To access the store, click the current payment plan name in the upper‑right corner of the M+ interface, or select &amp;quot;Store&amp;quot; from the left menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the StockSubmitter logo in the top-left corner to return to the store’s main page at any time. To the right, you will find your balance, email address, and language settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Store interface==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The store's top menu allows you to return to the main page, and also displays your current balance, email address, and language settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To return to the main page from any store page, left-click the StockSubmitter logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To top up your balance (&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NOT'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; to purchase plans!), view available promo codes, or review your financial transactions, left-click your balance and select the appropriate option from the dropdown list. For more details on topping up your balance, see [[#How to top up your balance? | here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To switch accounts or change the password for your current account, left-click your email address and select the relevant dropdown option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* To change interface language, left-click the current language and choose an option from the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colored tiles below mostly represent payment plans and packages for our core service and  its additional services, such as [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends | M+Trends]], [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Analytics | M+Analytics]], [[Special:MyLanguage/MicroStock+Storage | MicroStock+Storage]], and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very bottom of the page, you can review our Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and Refund Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's take a closer look at the plans: their duration, how they differ from packages, how to top up these plans, and how to cancel a subscription.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduled actions==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Planned actions eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This tile describes events that will take place on your account in the nearest future. The date in this tile is the last day of the current notional month. Thanks to this tile you always know the deadline for topping up your balance and which services are currently active on your account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What does &amp;quot;a month&amp;quot; mean within a subscription?==&lt;br /&gt;
We use a '''notional''' month as a unit of time measurement. It is a 30-days period starting starting from the moment of switching or activating plans or the last payment. Please note that some calendar months have 31 days or 28/29 days, so your payment date may shift and, for example, will not always fall on the first day of the calendar month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What is submission and how do we calculate them is explained in [[Special:MyLanguage/Подготовка, загрузка и сабмит файлов#Сабмит на стоки|this article]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to top up your balance==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Top up.png|left|x50px|frame|There you may top up your balance]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, click your balance in the upper‑right corner of the interface and select &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; from the dropdown menu. You will be directed to the balance top‑up form. Simply enter the required amount and click the &amp;quot;Top up&amp;quot; button. Next, choose your preferred payment system, click the Choose button, and follow the instructions. Please note that funds may not appear in your balance immediately. The exact processing time depends on the chosen payment system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to get and use promocodes?===&lt;br /&gt;
Every Christmas we perform a raffle among users. Make any purchases during a specified time period and get a Christmas present for every certain amount of money. There's a random prize inside of every present. You may find promocodes for a certain sum in EUR. You can't top up your balance with it but you may use it to cover up to 50% of any payment package.&lt;br /&gt;
To use a promocode, select any package you'd like to purchase. Select a payment method and notice a I Have A Promocode! button. Click it, paste a promocode then click Apply. To use another promocode for the same deal, just paste it in the form and click Apply again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What's a subscription plan and what's a subscription package?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A Subscription plan''' provides a single notional month (30-days period) of our service. Details for each individual plan are described in a plan card. Hover your mouse cursor over the question mark icon in the card to see extra information, such as available child accounts or the number of submits per notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Payment plan eng.png|left|x300px|frame|an example of a payment plan block]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under a subscription plan, your subscription fee is deducted from your balance monthly. Feel free to top up your balance for multiple months ahead — deductions will keep occurring until you change your plan or your funds run out. If your balance reaches zero, you will be automatically moved to the free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A subscription plan is a convenient way to try a paid service and determine how many submissions you need per month. Our system is highly flexible: you can purchase submissions at retail, or instantly upgrade your current plan by paying only the difference between your existing plan and a more expensive one. You can also schedule a switch back to your original plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;background: #CCEA9B; border:1px solid #3BAE62; padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important: You cannot pay for subscription packages with your balance!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' Do not top up your balance in advance if you plan to purchase a package. For information on how to purchase subscription packages, please refer to the [[#Subscription Packages| relevant section]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== StockSubmitter and Microstock+ payment plan management ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Plans eng.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile represents your current payment plan and available submissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the Increase Limit button you can increase the limit in the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Increase Limit''' button&lt;br /&gt;
# Input the number of submissions you'd like to purchase&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the '''Purchase''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our system is designed to give you the greatest benefit when you submit one file to many agencies. That's why submits are applied to all supported agencies simultaneously — helping you earn the maximum possible return from each file. Since we do not operate a billing system, we are unable to sell submits for just one stock agency or exchange submits from one agency for submits from another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To track the number of submits you have used, hover your mouse cursor over '''Submissions remaining''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Change Plan''' button to manage M+ and StockSubmitter plans and packages. See the [[#Subscription Packages|Subscription Packages]] section below for more information on packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to upgrade your current payment plan ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can instantly upgrade your current plan. In this case, the price difference between the plans will be deducted from your balance. However, the first day of your conditional month will remain the same (it will not shift), your submit usage will '''not reset''', and you will receive '''only''' the benefits of the more expensive plan (for example, more submits per month).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you'd like to upgrade your current Lite payment plan to Casual. The last payment was at 6'th of December. Tomorrow will be 3'th of January. If you're going to upgrade your payment plan right now, a full monthly fee for Casual plan will be deducted from your balance at 5'th of January (there are 31 days in January). Please, consider whether you will have enough time to use all of your submits before the end of the current notional month.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a cheaper payment plan?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're planning to switch to a cheaper payment plan, please, do it during a current notional month otherwise your payment plan will be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switching to a cheaper plan takes place at the end of the last paid notional month, but you can schedule this event at any time. Select a cheaper plan by clicking the '''Choose''' button in the plan's card, and it will activate automatically by the specified date. Payment for any plan occurs at the moment of activation (the end of the current 30-day period), please, make sure your balance has enough funds. If your balance is insufficient, you will be automatically switched to the Free payment plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subscription package''' entails a discounted one-time purchase of Subscription plan for one or several months (depending on a package). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Subscription package provides a significant profit, especially when you submit a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=700px heights=400px perrow=7&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Packages eng.png|left|frame|Subscription package&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''For example, you purchased the Casual subscription package for 6 notional months at the 3'th of January. You've paid 100 EUR and your balance has increased by 120 EUR. During next 6 months a monthly fee of 20 EUR will be taken from your balance: the next payment will be at the 2'th of February, then at the 4'th of March and so on until the end of the 6 months or the moment you run out of money on balance. Thus you pay a monthly fee as if you use a payment plan but we reimburse you the amount of the discount.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is very convenient because you won't have to wait for your package to expire if it no longer meets your needs, or if you urgently need to make purchases in our store. Any unused funds (after deducting the month you've already used) will remain on your balance and can be used for other services (but not for packages!).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your package expires, you will continue to be charged according to the plan associated with the package you purchased. If your balance has insufficient funds, you will be switched to the Free plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Packages such as Professional and Unlimited are designed for experienced stock contributors and studios. You can pay for up to two years upfront and never worry about remaining submits or balance top‑ups. The Starter and Lite packages are perfect for beginners and those whose submit varies by season or depends on files per shoot. Follow us on social media to receive additional discounts on packages during annual promotions. Our service offers packages for the following services: StockSubmitter/M+, M+Trends, and M+Storage. Packages are not available for M+Analytics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To purchase a package click the Change/Change plan button in any service tile on the Store main page. Select the Packages tab. M+Storage service doesn't provide any payment plans and you'll be automatically directed to the Packages tab.&lt;br /&gt;
For your convenience, if you already have a plan or package, your current plan will be displayed on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Show Packages''' button below any of the package blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a suitable time period in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Read the terms of use and click OK button if you're agree.&lt;br /&gt;
*You'll be moved to the payment page.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a preferred payment method from a dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have one or several promocodes, type or copypaste it in the form. You can cover up to 50% of your purchase with promocodes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the Agree button and follow the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
After the transaction is successfully completed and the payment is approved by the system, the full cost of the package will be credited to your balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to upgrade a payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have an active package and purchase a more expensive one, the remaining duration and submits from your current package will be reset. The full price of the new plan will then be charged, and that date will become the start of a new notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
If you won a free year of subscription to a more expensive payment plan than the one you use, a present will be activated immediately, the duration and submission usage will be reset. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month. Because we already credited your discount at purchase, you won't lose any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to switch to a less expensive payment package===&lt;br /&gt;
Immediately after payment, the funds will be credited to your balance, but won't be deducted until your current conditional month ends. During this waiting period, the package will be marked as Pending activation.&lt;br /&gt;
If you win a free one‑month subscription to a package that is cheaper than your current one, it will simply be scheduled as a regular switch to a cheaper package. After the gifted subscription ends, you are not required to buy a new package! Simply go to &amp;quot;Plans&amp;quot; and schedule a switch for the next notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:4a583e5a4a86a3bf46f7b052196bbd89.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Learn more about Microstock+ Trends in this [[Special:MyLanguage/Работа с MicroStock+Trends|article]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tile is quite similar to StockSubmitter/М+ payment plans tile. Paid subscriptions renew automatically from your balance. You can upgrade to a more expensive plan by paying only the price difference, under the same terms as StockSubmitter plans. Switching to a cheaper plan is only possible at the end of the last paid notional month. In the Packages tab, you can purchase a package for a term of six months or more. Please remember that packages CANNOT be purchased with your balance!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+Storage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Каждому пользователю М+ постоянно и бесплатно доступно 100 Гб места в облачном хранилище, но вы в любой момент можете арендовать до 4Тб дополнительного места для ваших файлов в рамках сервиса MicroStock+Storage. У этого сервиса нет тарифов, но есть пакеты, которые действуют минимум полгода. Пожалуйста, помните, что пакеты НЕ приобретаются с баланса!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Когда срок аренды подойдёт к концу, вам придёт соответствующее уведомление. Если вы всё-таки пропустите срок оплаты, в течение нескольких суток на вашу почту придёт письмо от нашей техподдержки. Функция загрузки на М+ будет заблокирована до тех пор, пока вы не удалите нужное количество файлов (чтобы удовлетворить лимит 100 Гб) или не приобретёте дополнительное место вновь. Если в течение месяца вы не решите проблему самостоятельно, мы будем вынуждены удалить часть ваших файлов с сервиса.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==How to vote for the next microstock agencies to add?==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock eng.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Adding and fully supporting agencies to our services takes a lot of our time and resources. That is why we had opened a poll for all users. Every time you make a purchase at the Store you get an opportunity to either vote for one of the microstock agencies or to add a new one to the poll. The poll is going to be there forever so don’t worry if you can’t vote right now. The current list is built based on the votes that have been already cast and it will change according to the new votes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New stock.png |left|700px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Подключение новых стоков занимает внушительное количество времени и ресурсов. Поэтому мы решили использовать голосование, чтобы определить самые популярные агентства и выстроить очередь. Совершая любые покупки на нашем сервисе вы получаете возможность проголосовать за один из 7 самых популярных претендентов или добавить нового и отдать голос ему.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Frequently asked questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to cancel a paid subscription?===&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the Store and open a page with payment plan blocks (for StockSubmitter/M+ or M+ Trends) then select a Free payment plan. This payment plan will be activated at the end of the current notional month.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I'm a Free subscription user but I'd like to try a paid subscription. Where do I begin?===&lt;br /&gt;
Start with the approximate estimate of submissions you need per month and take a closer look at the low-cost payment plans and packages. You may upgrade your payment plan at any moment and pay only the difference. Learn more in  [[#How to upgrade your current payment plan]] unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I switch back to a Starter package/how to save a Starter payment plan when the package has expired?===&lt;br /&gt;
If you've been using a Starter payment package but have switched to a cheaper/more expensive one, you may only switch back by purchasing Starter package again. You may save this payment package as a payment plan (and continue using it for any quantity of notional months) if you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee. To do so wait for the package to expire and don't switch the payment plan. Make sure you have enough money on balance to pay a monthly fee!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===I've purchased a one-year package but realized I don't need it. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
Purchasing a package doesn't mean that you must keep using it for the entire duration.&lt;br /&gt;
You've got a full package price on your balance as if you've purchased several months of payment plan usage. So you may change your payment plan at any time without losing any money.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
На ваш баланс уже поступила полная стоимость указанного количества условных месяцев. Поэтому просто переключитесь на тот тариф, который вам больше подходит.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;mw-translate-fuzzy&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==MicroStock+ Trends==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div lang=&amp;quot;ru&amp;quot; dir=&amp;quot;ltr&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;mw-content-ltr&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;''Например, вы используете тариф Lite. Вам доступно 250 сабмитов в месяц. Вы уже использовали 200 и приобретаете тариф Casual. После покупки вам будет доступно ещё 200 сабмитов на стоки до конца условного месяца.''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/60/en&amp;diff=2764</id>
		<title>Translations:Управление тарифами и пакетами подписок/60/en</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.microstock.plus/index.php?title=Translations:%D0%A3%D0%BF%D1%80%D0%B0%D0%B2%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5_%D1%82%D0%B0%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%84%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%B0%D0%BA%D0%B5%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BC%D0%B8_%D0%BF%D0%BE%D0%B4%D0%BF%D0%B8%D1%81%D0%BE%D0%BA/60/en&amp;diff=2764"/>
		<updated>2026-04-07T19:33:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;PlagueEater: Новая страница: «x300px|&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;»&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Storage.png|left|x300px|]]&amp;lt;br clear=all&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>PlagueEater</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>